Casio | EX-MR1 | User manual | Casio EX-MR1 دليل الاستخدام

Casio EX-MR1 دليل الاستخدام
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫‪EXILIM‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪http://www.exilim.com/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-80‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻴﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ!‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ .٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻀﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺰﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪12 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪14 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪16 ................................................................. .‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪16............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪17...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪22 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪23 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ‪23..................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪24........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪25..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪26 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪27 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪27.................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪28................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪31 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪32 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪34 ................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪35 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪36 .... (ART SHOT)..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪38 ...................................................................................BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪40 .....(LED) .......................................................................LED‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪41 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ‪) ..........................................‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‪42 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ‪43 .....(Make-up) ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ‪44 ................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪45 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪47 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪49 .....‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪) .................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪49......‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) ...........................................................‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪50......‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪51......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪) ..........................................‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪52......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪)......................................... [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪53......‬‬
‫❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪)........................................................‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‪53......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪)...................................................................‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‪54......‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪) ............................................................‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‪54......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪) ................................................................‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪54......‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪)....................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪55 .....‬‬
‫❚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪)....................................................................‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪55......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ») .................................................‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‪56......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) ................................................................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪56......(EV‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪) .......................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪57......‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪59......(ISO) .......................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .....................................................................‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‪60......‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪)................................................‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪60......‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪61 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪61 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪62 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪62 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪63 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪) ............................................................‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‪64 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ..............................................‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪64 .....‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ‪) .......................................................‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‪65 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪)................................‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪66 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴُﺎ ‪) ............................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪66 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪).................................................................................‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪67 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪) .............................................................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪67 .....(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪) .....................................................................‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪68 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪68 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪) ..............................................................................‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‪69 .....‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) ..................................................................................‬ﻧﺴﺦ(‪70 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪) ................................................................‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪70 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪71 .....................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪72...........................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪72...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) ...................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪74 .....‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪75 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪75 .......................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪78 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪79 ............................................ Windows‬‬
‫❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪79...................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪82.........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪83 ........................................................................ Macintosh‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪83................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪85..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪86 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪87 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) ...............................................................‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪88 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) ....................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪88 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪) .......................‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪88 .....(WALN‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) ..........................................................‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪89 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) ............................................................‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪89 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) .........................................‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪90 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪) ...................................................‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‪90 .....‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪) ..............................................................‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪91 .....‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪).........................................................................‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‪92 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪92 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪93 .....(Language) ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪).............................................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‪93 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) .............................................‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪94 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪94 ..... (PLAY)...................................................................................... [p‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪95 .....‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) ...........................‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪95 .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫❚❙ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪96 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪104 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪110 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪110 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪110 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ‪111 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪111 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪112 .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪114 ................................................................ ...‬‬
‫❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪114 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫❚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪119 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪121 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪122 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪12 3‬‬
‫‪bk bl‬‬
‫] [‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(28‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫‪) [p] 3‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(19 ،17‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪[CARD USB‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫] [‬
‫] [‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫] [‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺯﺭ ] [ )‪(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(72‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(8‬‬
‫‪ bn‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(20 ،18‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(26 ،31‬‬
‫‪bs br bq bp bo bn bm‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﺯﺭ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(35‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ bt‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(16‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ cl‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪cl ck bt‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫)]‪([6] [4] [2] [8‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(63 ،47 ،35‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(121‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(51‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(122‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫‪ bm‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪) Make-up bn‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫‪ bo‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬
‫‪ bp‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(92‬‬
‫‪ bq‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬
‫‪ br‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ bs‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(49 ،29‬‬
‫‪ bt‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(91‬‬
‫‪ ck‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫‪ cl‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫‪ cm‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪ cn‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪bm‬‬
‫‪bn‬‬
‫‪bo‬‬
‫‪cn‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪cl‬‬
‫‪bp‬‬
‫‪bt bs brbq‬‬
‫‪ck‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(49 ،29‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪123 4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪bk‬‬
‫‪bl‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(64‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(86‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(59‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪ bk‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(92‬‬
‫‪ bl‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪123 4‬‬
‫‪(64‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(68‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(86‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(92‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 27‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Make-up‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 43‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ART SHOT‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 36‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺈﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪،42‬‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪ 64‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 38‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ ﻭﻗﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 65‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 63‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 71‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﺟﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-80‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺩﻓﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ١٥٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(110‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫)‪ .(2 ،1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ١٥٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫]‪[USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(110‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫)ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (NP-80‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳًﺎ )‪ .(BC-80L‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 124‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻔﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 93‬ﻭ ‪.(94‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪) “(Language‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(93‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٦ ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪3‬‬
‫‪16/7/10‬‬
‫‪10/7/16‬‬
‫‪7/10/16‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫]‪[0‬‬
‫)ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪93‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪92‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺒﻜﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.121‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪microSD‬‬
‫‪microSDHC‬‬
‫‪microSDXC‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﺴﻄﺲ ‪.٢٠١٤‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ microSD‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDXC‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﺤﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ » ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC‬ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD USB‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫)ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD USB‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (23‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻂء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﺊ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(61 ،31‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(94 ،93‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(94‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 36‬ﻭ ‪.38‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ R‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ )ﻭﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ( ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫]‪[6][4][2][8‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(121‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ ،[2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻮ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (49‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (47‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ,‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ,‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ,‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ » ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪EV‬‬
‫– ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (27‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Make-up‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.61‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(70‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [8‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(62‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[6‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪) “Ü‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪) “Ü‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪) “Ü‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪“.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‬
‫– ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫– ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫– ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫]‪[6] [4] [2] [8‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(38 ،36 ،27‬‬
‫‪) Make-up 5‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻷﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫– ‪ :Make-up‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(ART SHOT‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﻭﺷﺎﻋﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﺎﻣﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ ،(ART SHOT) “ART‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 37‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ART SHOT‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،Make-up ،CS‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ “ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ” ﻛﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ(‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪“b‬‬
‫)‪ ،(BEST SHOT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪[6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 39‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) R‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻂء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ”ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻂء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻀﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ .BEST SHOT‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪(LED) LED‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪“LED‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Ñ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ì‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ï‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ×‪) 3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ(‬
‫‪ Î‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪Make-up ،ART SHOT ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) m‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(40‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫– ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(89‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(64‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‪) “Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(35‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[4‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬
‫”‪ “0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫”‪“0‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪“6+‬‬
‫”‪“12+‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (50‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺑﺸﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ“ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ”‪.“0‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،CS ،ART SHOT ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪HD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪SR‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫]‪[8] [2‬‬
‫]‪) [2‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [8‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ”ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫”‪“Ù‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(55‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪2.0X‬‬
‫‪4.0X‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪4.2X‬‬
‫‪8.4X‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ‪.2.0X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(121‬‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬
‫‪،(38‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫– ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ » ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪.EV‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 63‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ“ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ً [4‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ [MENU‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ" ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (30‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.47‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ“ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(50‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ Make-up‬ﻭﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ*‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫´‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬
‫‪PF‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٣‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﺎﺑ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫)ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪًﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) PF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫– ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬
‫– ﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (27‬ﺃﻭ ‪) Make-up‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (43‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪CS 3‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫– ‪Make-up‬‬
‫– ‪ART SHOT‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫– ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” (59‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫]‪[6]/[4‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪) EV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(57‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ*‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(59‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ .“Make-up‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‪ ...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ ،LED‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫)‪(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (69‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬
‫"‪5"×3.5‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ”‪.“14M‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻛﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺩﻗﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ”ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ“‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻀﺤﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ (L‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪x‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪ ١٤) ٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫‪ ٣) ١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.121‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.56‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.68‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )» ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪3‬‬
‫» ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (FHD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٦٫٦‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪STD‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “FHD‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ( ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(121‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪(EV‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2.0 EV‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3 EV :‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [8‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [2‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0.0‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.(“0.0‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ¤‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫' )ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫“ )ﻇﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫† )ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫– )ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫« )ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ISO 3‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫‪ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ISO 200‬‬
‫‪ISO 400‬‬
‫‪ISO 800‬‬
‫‪ISO 1600‬‬
‫‪ISO 3200‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪” ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ï‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Ì‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ART SHOT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (36‬ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 31‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫»‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2] [8‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪،8X‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[8] [2‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.36‬‬
‫‪ Ü‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ü‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(32‬‬
‫‪ä‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ )ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ m‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (89‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[SET‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(63‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٦٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ“‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[MENU‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ً [SET‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪٣:٤‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [6] ،[4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (٢١١٢x٢٨١٦) 6M‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴُﺎ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 75‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[MENU‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫”ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 10M :‬ﻭ ‪ 5M‬ﻭ ‪.VGA‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ‪.٣:٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻧﺴﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ Google Play (Android‬ﺃﻭ )‪ App Store (iOS‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪.App Store‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪71‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Link‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“Google Play‬‬
‫‪iPhone .‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ”‪.“EXILIM Link‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ”‪.“App Store‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ )‪.(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪“WLAN‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(88‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪SSID‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪.“Connection Starting‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”‪.“Agree‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪72‬‬
‫“‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“EXILIM Link‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ً .(MOV‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪:iPhone‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Android‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪73‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.EXILIM Link‬‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 3M‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪74‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(75‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 3 DPOF‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 3 [MENU] 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 3 DPOF‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “00‬ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻉ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪!DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(75‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(91‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ DPOF‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﺘﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫‪Exif Print‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Exif Print‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫‪ Exif Print‬ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(83 ،79‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(85 ،82‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Windows‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ “Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.79‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪” Macintosh‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪ “Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.83‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬
‫‪،Windows 8‬‬
‫‪،Windows 7‬‬
‫‪ QuickTime 7‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(20‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ : Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ”‪.“DCIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ ،“DCIM‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫“‬
‫”‬
‫“‬
‫”‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪Vista ،Windows 7‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.87‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫‪Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ،Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪:“FHD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠ Core 2 Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ”‪:“STD‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢ Pentium 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ QuickTime 7 :‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.“STD‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪OS X‬‬
‫‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.Macintosh‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ OS X 10.5‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) QuickTime Player‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS X 10.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .10.4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ Mac OS 10.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪) 10.9‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(20‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.87‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mac‬‬
‫‪OS‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪X 10.5 :‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪) QuickTime Player :‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“STD‬‬
‫– ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(87‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .CIMG9999‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪CIMG0026.JPG‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100CASIO‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.999CASIO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٩٠٠‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪100CASIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)‪.Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪DCIM‬‬
‫‪100CASIO‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪CIMG0001.JPG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪CIMG0002.MOV‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪DCIM‬‬
‫‪101CASIO‬‬
‫‪102CASIO‬‬
‫‪MISC‬‬
‫‪AUTPRINT.MRK‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ‪DCIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .DCIM‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ .DCIM‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 87‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(63‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻛﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 74‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WALN‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WALN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ :5 - 1‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (95‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(86‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫”ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻔﻲ“‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪ ١:٢٥ ،٢٠١٦ ،‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪2016/7/10‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪2016/7/10 1:25pm‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(77‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫]‪[2] [8‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫]‪[6] [4‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٢٠٤٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (90‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(90‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٦ ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬
‫‪16/7/10‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪10/7/16‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪7/10/16‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪Language 3‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺃُﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃُﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪(PLAY) [p‬‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪PLAY 3‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫– ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪ 3 [MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 112‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫!‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )‪ (0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫)‪(-‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺬﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺧﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪...‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻑ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺸﻄﻔﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻄﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪%‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻭﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺄﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺩﺣﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻨﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺸﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫– )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﻤﻀﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻔﻄﻪ ﺑﻤﺎء ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‬‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬
‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺸﻄﻒ ﻓﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻪ ﻟﺠﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻄﻒ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫– ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(119‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٪٨٥‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫– ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺷﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻕ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻘﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/r-law/dc/‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ‪CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (95‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎً ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﻕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ microSDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8‬ﻭ‪Windows 8.1‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhoto‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Android‬ﻭ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Google Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ App Store‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ iOS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Cisco Systems, Inc.‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ EXILIM‬ﻭ‪ EXILIM Link‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪107‬‬
iPerf (BSD License)
Copyright (c) The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois
All Rights Reserved.
Iperf performance test
Mark Gates
Ajay Tirumala
Jim Ferguson
Jon Dugan
Feng Qin
Kevin Gibbs
John Estabrook
National Laboratory for Applied Network Research
National Center for Supercomputing Applications
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimers.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
Software without specific prior written permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
108
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
inet_ntop, inet_pton
ISC License (ISC)
[OSI Approved License]
Copyright (c) 4-digit year, Company or Person's Name
Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with
or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
109
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪ (NP-80‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 23‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(95‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CD-RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ » ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪REC‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫» ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪EV‬‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪3M‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ WLAN‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ –‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪/ 1‬‬
‫= ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪/ ...////‬‬
‫= ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫‪...////‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(17‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-80‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(94‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪ (١ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ“ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻮ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ´ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ( ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ´ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ( ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪ CMOS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺿﻮء ﻛﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(27‬‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻟﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪) +‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(105‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (30‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(68‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(72‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺮﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(92‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(93‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ً‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ًﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(93 ،22‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(95‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(70 ،54‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(22‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ALERT‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ‪٩٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٩٩٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM ERROR‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫‪CASIO‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(95‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬
‫‪*microSD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠) 14M‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٢٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٤٧٩٨‬‬
‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M‬‬
‫‪ ٨٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪١٨٩٦٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪*microSD‬‬
‫‪FHD‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪STD‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ ١٦٫٦‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺝ ﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪١٢٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٣٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .(SanDisk Corporation‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .FHD‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Ultra‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(46 ،23‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻝ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪121‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ؛ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،H.264/AVC‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪) IMA-ADPCM‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ٢٨٫٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪microSDXC/microSDHC/microSD‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨) 3M ،(٣٢٤٠x٤٣٢٠) 14M‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠) STD ،(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠) FHD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ٢٫٣/١ CMOS :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ١٦٫٧٦ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٨ = F5.0/f‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٢١‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8.4X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(3M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ)ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪ ١٠ :‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﻲ‪ ١٫٣ :‬ﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪9 :‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪ –2.0 EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +2.0 EV‬ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ‪(1/3 EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ١٠/١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ(‪ ١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪CMOS‬‬
‫‪122‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫* ‪F5.0‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،‬‬
‫‪ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪LED‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪WPA2 :‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ TFT‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٦٠,٨٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪١x (NP-80‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪*(FHD‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪*(FHD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ٢٣ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) NP-80 :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ٧٠٠ :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ SanDisk Corporation‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬
‫‪(UHS-I‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪CASIO‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٣٫١ ،‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ١٠٤٫٢‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٣٣‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*(‬
‫‪ ١١٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫* ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ microSDHC‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪) ٦٠٫٨‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫‪124‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪) ٢١٫١‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-80‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٧٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٣١٫٤‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٣٩٫٥ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٥٫٩ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ٦٥٠ ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) ٥٣‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٢١ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ٤٥ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪125‬‬
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
M29
MA1601-B
2014
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising